Home

2010 Jeep Compass Owner Manual - Dealer e

1. een 384 421 sys 4444 PC r T 385 oc 385 Onboard Diagnostic System lt lt sa seem 379 380 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 152 Operator Manual Owner s Manual D guru AP 285 Overcast IPIS uus 33x vibe RIMIS 189 358 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 451 lue n C 403 L amnic AIO 832 3 39 30999 29 9 eee oot dg Sox 23 Farkine Brake 2 39 dese dico qnd pikite p ENEI 209 Passi EISE occa ist d vere d xc Para Sg ee ys 143 Personal SUNS 26 hash eG bao Road deed 201 Ves P 80 Phone Cellular leen 93 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 93 Placard Tire and Loading Information 313 Power Door LOCKS 4 gauge qu 3 se mich Y 13 ER dE ad 29 NUON CC C 91 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 161 vic M PP m 291 299 DUNTOO 2452 4458 stage a5 toe SUPR ERES 158 Tanseer WW Mr 403 en INDEX 467 VWndoWS 24 55 2444240geuue 5 bEEAT 33 Power Steering PIU seerste pea Peso p dob d 423 Power Transfer Unit uus qe ddr IR qoid epe 403 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts DD Preparation for Jacking iaa ews dae re hs 361 Pretensioners Peat Bele Arc 49 Programmable Electronic Features 201 Radial GS rm 320 Radio Operation ary Gedy eee 4 Borna co eee oe qd 209 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 252 Rear Axle Differential s
2. 324 Snow Dites oa teen a aema 9 3 bi Perai OR S 325 Spate Mie PUTET 320 361 Specifications Ol LL ees eee eee Gee oe eee eee ee 384 Speed Control Cruise Control 148 189 vjersse ronis A ane ese eae uses oes oa ee ee os 184 TU 4 2 ae hoe 8 DEICRPREE NU S TEES eo 277 Automatic Transmission sn 277 Engine Fails to Start axes Xue oS PER 2 9 Manual Transmission less 27 KODNOG 2594 939 sods Aue eh a M est ous E Pup 2 oe 20 Starting PrOCBIUNBS x24 2276 dore gins 277 Steering Power ac i eboe Ra Dhba ad boewedbeavin 291 293 TIC OTHO eo eed vue secede eee estes 147 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System CONMOIS uos uar diee Poena bibas 257 OE 494 es XR GA Soe ESSE A RR RR GS 166 411 DIDIISS BIN wan erea eee oe ee Gwe eee 166 Orages Venice 42 4 Sho eakeyen e drug 44 48 270 v dad ID P r 370 SHARO bdo xd PES e eo ok Ea ERE 158 Dun Visor Extension uus ask o exi RE RE COS o ded 92 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 56 Synthetic Engine Oil eA S II LUI ILLAXLUICSCIoUS omAIUZTueoogdqICLLLLOLK4q 11 4U44iu uU i14LLLLLIIDLAULAU AL LLUNUBSD LLEA 4A3UoAI4n1UOUMO Aa IlOLOhI DAOAG oystem Remote STINS 124 2 393 9 9 3 9 9 ah 25 TachoBel P wave dde Poe dae Ee dde e eris 186 uii P aoe Ge oe RE ER a Foss 416 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 264 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 189 999 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 76 T
3. 408 E LLL EE e sie roo a TET 423 W Vehicle Storage scsce004 dci dOR RR ERR 411 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L c t wt oo gue P A if a ee cmi MSIITMLL JL e j BN Ld Ls gt s a E O gt P d e F P Lll MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 070306968 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Battery Under Cover 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Air Cleaner Filter 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L uvis o oo ux r Vo dm m S UND RN E RS 070305628 6 Battery Under Cover 7 Air Cleaner Filter 1r 1 Washer Fluid Reservo 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within
4. ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide enhanced protec tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The supplemental side seat airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat t l 022610242 Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Side Curtain Airbag Label Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KN
5. 00 362 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e Incity traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 CAUTION e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When to high This allows the heater core
6. Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features B instrument Cluster W Instrument Cluster Descriptions ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC I Dui Ded 2x3 998 Eod ani Pag PE ou oes O Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped D EVIC Functions XO Compass Temperature Audio D Average Fuel Economy o Distance To Empty DTE D Tire Pressure Monitor TPM A Elapsed MING a ssaa ieai eos Oma rp s 201 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 201 ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MPo7 WMA AUX Jack Li sce dear eR denen 2 206 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 206 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video o Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped a xia eR ERR bas O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio 214 216 B Clock Setting Procedure RER RON Radio ou ied ies 62 cet dede Reti ed ll Media Center 130 RES AM
7. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tir
8. e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Air Conditioner Control NOTE Press this button to turn on the air When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position the recirculation feature will be cancelled only Wh
9. e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE A Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates the full upward position and push the seatback forward against heat such as a blanket or cushion This until it rests on the seat cushion may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 030907664 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat 030910214 Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 7 di ML a 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint 134 UNDERSTANDIN
10. 022206146 passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Liftgate Latch Location the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC p for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automati
11. 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the s
12. Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all
13. Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Countr D Pun add S ME E Foreign Language Information Jazz News ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter Whe
14. 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
15. 2010 Ompass o m O c O e esI e o e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 4C soe eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Information Provided by D ANANL R CONTENTS B introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION M oo LLL LLILIIILIULLLILIILIIILIIIILLLIUILLL AeLILLL OLLL LSILUO U00 ULoILU IA 0g GGUGD uIeco OCOB UucdLILLLLLILALLAALOAPIBDUOoeBGB L LG4LTGDCE E EAOLULULIGw INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom
16. e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap A Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 022607725 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far fo
17. ming the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until the EVIC displays the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features menu press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until Cali brate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Press the EVIC button more than one second this will place the Compass in calibration mode The CAL 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate 5 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE Press the EVIC button less than one second from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal ope
18. 405 Wid BUMCUNS uou yee cow Guede cade wens ee 161 WINGOW FOEN ise macies opa bord ee es 27 ADOOS 226644 soe 5 ea 0 bea tone eS me soe 33 lv c och eae pao ae yo 33 Windshield Defroster 83 262 268 Windshield Washers 144 146 Windshield WIPES sidas acbnop eA same de 144 390 Wipers IDEeFOHU GNU uu sa x x3 3435848504 eee 146 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10MK49 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A be LJ E L X
19. 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel FILILH iP FLA i LI aO ik o ETAT LURR i i r iil jl i A Es re NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 363 WARNING Continued 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the If working on or near a roadway be extremely ground careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve ste
20. COPIE 2444 94 d RPAUP EE REEERE 421 VledW ait oy ecc wars ERATIS SIE WE 335 Piller Cap Gas Cap ace eoe des cro es 339 CEOE eaea e Pub EUER oe dH ARUM A 335 O seters rp ERANA eG 183 Light ARCU TIL 184 Octane RAUDE uuradgenactoobaes m tha n 05 335 INCQUINCMICING Se cetevaraenedees Seeuees OOD Tank Capaci 26 eects ct merae SUP eor dem hes 421 Fuel Systemi I GPIDOIE tacea sca teem oad CERE 340 dg PCT 339 lg E TE 408 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 152 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 339 341 379 Gasoline Clean Air eee 335 Gasoline Fuel llle 335 421 Gasoline Reformulated 336 462 INDEX M Gauges Coolant Temperate 22265445644 nee ORE Y 189 PUO 3939229 9935 ROS eee eee aes apa 183 Odometer oues us cR RUREQES SUE ORE E EE 192 ibn TP 186 ecc rr 284 General Information 18 121 334 General Maintenance s sss ee hut daw kiris 382 lass C N eera e teasers S 407 Gross Axle Weight Rating 9e rer aea 344 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 342 344 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 93 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 4 4 289 Hazard Warning Flasher 22e 22r ER s 358 Head Resh ants uos dst het eee P PIS ees 133 POU NS shake penre 413 ml up A anir ERRE pri ee a 407 Meh Ream 22 3 939 A 439929394 eqd pd 143 High Beam Low Beam Select 5witch 143 Po
21. In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and t
22. N A PASSENGER AIRBAG GFF TURN RUMALE HENTE ENT Mi ir 5 l E UPPER AMD LOWER HEATED SEAT WIRY LIFT b thc i AI CRITLET Hs hed J O um bi Lowes jum mEcimcliLkTiKgW CcOWwwERTEMLE DUTLET A WOO DOM TOTAAL oH 8 e LIFTOATE RELEASE ELEN THOF AMD uc DEFROST AMO WEMIILATIMG FAN WIMDOWLDCK THROTTLE LOVER AIR OUTLET CONTROL 9 A a5 Ai VOICE Guin DCKORI ho AM CONDITIONING AECOGRITEDH a BUTTON f Ip DOCOSI E VbiitTER reed gc CHILDREN ATCA ed ene DoD AJAR CONVERTIBLE COWVER TLE TOP DOWN TOR s dep dna ELECTRONIC XTABILITY ELECT PROGRAM j PHARE EPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYST La BRAKE gt 0 BRAKE STE TEM HILL DESCENT WARHIMO FARKUNG CONTROS BRAKE awor fe ALL WHEEL FARE aT DRIVE ETIAHIMC UZIEM AWD BRAKE BAAR SYSTEM FOUH WHEEL HARAG PARTING DANE BRAWE TOW HAUL WA Fh C TOW HAUL 4 LOW WAZAAD FOUR WHEEL DANE LOW AIC PUSH Am ar RRM CONTROL OFF 010507683 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS a This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible thr
23. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine ai
24. Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirrors To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left The control for the power mirrors is located on the or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand driver s door trim panel in the direction you want the mirror to move When finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror 030406198 Power Mirror Control 030410215 Mirror Directions 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too
25. T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear imprope
26. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning o
27. at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transaxle is in aan ie AE aan 2 NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position Recreational Manual Trans Automatic CAUTION Towing Condition axle Vehicles Transaxle Vehicles Four Wheel Flat Yes Never Tow All Wheels on Ground e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a automatic transaxle Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Two Wheel Dolly Never Tow Front or Rear Wheels on Ground Flat Bed Tow All Yes Yes Wheels on Bed of Truck Information Provided by D ANANL R WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flasher 358 W Jump Starting Procedures 366 lB If Your Engine Overheats 358 O Preparations For Jump Start 367 W Automatic Transaxle Overheating 360 D Jump Starting Procedure W Jacking And Tire Changing 360 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ult dE Boon PPP 361 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle appare Te DONE 2 ay eee oe oe CERE A 361 E Wi IPOs x 4245 os ERRORES 371 O Preparations For Jacking 361 O Without The Ignition Key 373 O Jacking Instructions
28. cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by
29. equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie DOOR LOCKS WARNINCG Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound
30. ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consi
31. system will not affect the other system The manual transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could has been in a tightly closed container Keep the be damaged causing partial or complete brake master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times failure This could result in an accident Brake fluid in a open c
32. 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 f
33. 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 B How Io Use Remote Start s ue res 25 aM Door Locks 22x22 son eR dnd 28 br Manual Door Locks 2222 dE 46246 28 b Power Door Locks 22 929 a et xus s 20 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors 2 3 do 6 amp OH E A d EUR SORS 32 Mi Power Windows If Equipped 33 O Power Window Switches 33 sr tons db 65460444 58 e oe 4 oes 6 ee mo 34 o Window Lockout Switch 35 Re EEEE E ET 35 W Occupant Restraints 0055 37 O Lap Shoulder Belts 2 442 tod mews oho sare 39 0 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 O Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions eos ko mE eR eA 45 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 D Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped s s a cocci heh sme 9 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped O Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR 0 00008 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert uus er 404 4652 Cheeks 53 O Seat Delt Extender sss opas use quc undi tae E 55 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 55 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS D upnro M c 56 o Advanced Front Airbag Features 58 O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls D Event Data Recorder EDR D Child Restraint ll Engine Break In Recommendations ll Safety Tips D Transporting Passengers o Exh
34. 383 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 9 9 APON ME Ol Titer e esis oe ee a Ea vc at 386 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 979 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2s ore xe a 386 Mi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance E Maintenance Free Battery c4eh eee lt haee LIOBPOUS tad qe uwee a uas ye ee Ede Pu 380 SERES EN B Replacement Parts 2004 381 3 Body Lubrication eese 389 W Dealer Service cs va durae d 44554524084 382 5 Windshield Wiper Blades 390 o Adding Washer Fluid seus 390 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ELBXhaust SYSICM soriedeceReLRESES HAS 391 W Replacement Bulbs 412 ACoolng Syse ueoregtee pone ee et bo ea g d 393 W Bulb Replacement ga403 atari eu eee os 413 Fl Brake system PPP eon Rasa d 398 mairie eee ds 413 O Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped 400 LPOG LAWS se ead eee eh eye eee bee ae 415 o Manual Transaxle If Equipped 401 o Tail Lamp Rear Turn Signal And Backup D Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD LUND EP PSR eae RSS tease 416 Models Only 5 i554 44634 9755 E PS eu eee 402 A License Lamps 244 544445 edv SURE CU AO RSS 417 o Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD 4WD O Center High Mounted Stoplamp 419 Modelo Only se 3424544064 645452 V E SCR 403 DOffRoadlamp sss sese A19 CIR OAT a ell eea m E Fuses L L L LLL 408 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 422 O Integrated Power Module IPM
35. Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines
36. Equipped 148 TIO ACHV Ate uc cdd 9e e 6 aros Sors 149 H To Set a Desired Speed a a eec erm 150 LIO DeACHVale ssu redere ao YE UR Pa 150 O To Resume Speed 4a min send bho Gece 150 o To Vary The Speed Setting 150 Er Manual TEOSEDO e eg dde pce oh ew Bo ee t lol o To Accelerate For Passing 151 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped D Programming HomeLink H Gate Operator Canadian Programming 156 Este HOmechink uus scies ace Sacre ers 156 O Reprogramming A Single HomeLmk Button sises scere s dos 157 Bhce PPP 157 E Troubleshooting Tips as sce a 0e dern 157 O General Information u esa Xe Eee a 158 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 158 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie O Opening The SUMf00f 22 c40 4 5 eu E 159 O Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 166 Ok losing The SuftOOl isese so a s pee zu c 159 Q Door DIDIIS s onse 9d m TsAS INNEN SS 167 O Pinch Protect Feature 2 ascenso sends wed 160 W Console Features eese 168 E Pinch Protect Override 2 246424404e0a lt 160 M Cargo Area Features 04 169 O Venting SUNLOOL Express xeu sce eed res 160 H Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging D Sunshade Operation ouuu 160 HIGSDHS DU 624 edokes io ee ek d p ce d cane et 169 5 Wind Buffeting o on 00 cece eee pu eC NEP pear a O Sunroof Maintenance 161 EANO O POE OO ace eg ata ae ere a i O Igniti
37. Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Dome 29 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Lt Blue Lamp Sunroof Rear Lt Blue Feed 3 Wiper Motor ACC 24 15 Amp _ Power Sunroof Feed Inverter Lt Blue 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm 10 Amp Heated Mirror Red Red If Equippe ASD Relay Contact 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed PWR Feed Lt Blue 2 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 amp Amp 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Yellow 2 Feed Red Feed 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio 28 10 Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM Lt Blue Red Feed 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus 29 Hot Car Red Mod Siren No Fuse Required It Equipped 30 20Amp Heated Seat 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC Yellow If Equipped Red Compass Sensor MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 CAUTION e When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure Fuse Fuse u Red Relay Control If Equipped EN ud Feed 1 ABS MOD 1962 Red Conn PCM x Ep qe ee pme When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Headlamp Washer Control Smart Glass If Equipped VEHICLE STORAGE ae 25 Amp If you will not be using your vehicle for more
38. IndIcalor xu Eu I RXPYRRRE YS 185 Instrument Cluster 222222922 ms 140 LION 4486 xXs3 9 be pbb ee one ne NS ES 417 Iaehts On Reminder serrr irte rinri 141 LOW Piel MP 184 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 194 Map Reading aos queues 9 599 3 8 a E get tied a 144 Oil Pressure ose voteR EU EG ROLE EROR ROMS 184 Seat Belt Reminder ls 185 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 188 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 2235299 RR 188 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 190 Tracom Contiol tase 4 oe roy r2 Su t 304 Users qh er rr er EROR Y 83 140 142 416 poo P 183 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 183 Loading Veliele ux tesnceeuegen ang nae oe 341 343 Capacities 45224844 e457 t ah eey seed oe eee 343 Dues gg ee eee ee ee ee eee 313 A INDEX 465 Locks Child PEOIGOEOBE a d 6 0 ooh se dodge b arida 32 poo Pr 28 Power DOO rr 29 EVROICAUONy Ody 222468 3 045 9 52 3 eas ages 389 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 176 Wiper SUDO 465 s g ae dn hoe eee seg a dores 128 Maintenance Free Battery aude aes yee cada es 387 Maintenance General 0000008 382 Maintenance Procedures iu uu irr Rs 382 Maintenance Schedule issus 426 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 194 380 Manual Service v 08 uuo Xo Rye 64402 451 Manual Transaxle 277 280 401 Boy audor PE 281 Fluid Level Check Ln 402 403
39. Listed Se Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number is played Enter Location New Entry Added Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming i imi Reset Device Towing i Mic aac Anilo mim Voice Training Pairing Emergency Assistance Select Phone Language Announcement Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts orvott Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing temporarily or Francais override phone priorities Select phone Phone Deleted System confirms All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send MEE set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing as
40. M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt s O C O C O L L C L L L C L L
41. Monitoring Sensor s is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Check TPM System Display 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 5 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 m
42. Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perf
43. Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will pr
44. according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The most common causes of corrosion are e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation CUN i your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint t d li t i a DNI DC e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e nsects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch e Wash your vehicle regularly Always w
45. active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the EVIC button until On or Off appears Display Units In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ENGLISH or METRIC appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped ru When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by com pleting one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set
46. and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pr
47. and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem
48. are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently WARNING Continued sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic Battery posts terminals and related accessories maintenance required contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling WARNING e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid CAUTION splashes in eyes or
49. as a reminder to remove the key 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you wan
50. attempting a jump start Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws located on the radiator support Air Intake Finger Screws WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES xe 00 WARNING si 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery RENI park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNINC moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Tu
51. automatic transaxle under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run cools down enough to allow a return to the the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you requested speed If the high speed is maintained the need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas E WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 361 Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down in the cargo area Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas WARNINCG Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transaxle or Spare Tire Stowage REVERSE manual transaxle The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor 4 Turn OFF the ignition in the cargo area 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher
52. available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is
53. begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Operation Instructi
54. by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uco
55. cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phon
56. child restraint should only be NOTE For additional information refer to Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana restraint dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the where you will use it before you buy it retractor For additional information on ALR refer to e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s Automatic Locking Mode weight and height Check the label on the restraint for e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child 2 weight and height limits restraint manufacturer s directions e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seatbelts are
57. definitions will assist you in understanding the information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer
58. device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the 034206938 device Power Sunroof Switch The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being Express Mode thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed Always will open automatically from any position The sunroof fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all will open fully and stop automatically this is
59. disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the
60. eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and
61. engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct t
62. engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Malfunc tion Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously STARTING AND OPERATING 305 e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes for four wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two wheel drive equipped vehicles Full On Four Wheel Drive Models or On Two Wheel 5 Drive Models This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M Partial Off Four Wheel Drive Models or On Two Wheel Drive Models This mode is entered by momentarily pressing t
63. feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons
64. foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The key must be in the ignition and in the ON position to use the override lever If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M DO NOT Be DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or WARNING NEUTRAL positions into another gear
65. for cracks or leaks and all parts for equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N
66. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING When temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rup ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before
67. in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 316 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 ibs EE ee an minus 865 ibs Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 lbs Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupa 100 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 2
68. indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 9 High Beam Indicator z This indicator shows that the high beam head E lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 10 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
69. is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power a Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans ee Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake Information Provided by D ANANL R MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 426 Bl Maintenance Schedule 426 H Required Maintenance Intervals 428 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part tha
70. leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system tions of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never si
71. lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e Preset 5 Audiobooks e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is e Preset 6 Podcasts en shortcut button to the genre listing on your e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on CAUTION h line the second line e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can same PRESET button again to go back to Play alter the operation or damage the device Follow mode the device manufacturer s guidelines e LIST button The LIST button will display the top ce items on the iPod or connections to the level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the to list the top menu item you wish to select and press device and or to the connectors the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are availa
72. not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location Jc 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location 314 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the t
73. on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not ca
74. out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Pressure Moni toring System TPMS for system operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or STARI position Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano Francais or NL de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE Uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in Uconnect Phone If Equipped for deta
75. ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character exten
76. restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ia d WARNING Continued Io provide additional storage area each rear seatback can e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable coat forward and flat DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed 030906210 Folding Rear Seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the OO seatback to a reclined posit
77. roads that are winding icy snow covered or Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to slippery be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink Control channels WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 81cb44fe HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand HomeLink Buttons held transmitters that operate devices such as garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu door openers motorized gates lighting or home security rity Alarm is active systems The HomeLink unit operates o
78. the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNINCG Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle
79. the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be dis played during this three second window 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs
80. the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After AutoStick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE e When in sixth position touching the shift lever to the right e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected General Information e If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio e If alow range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio STARTING AND OPERATING 287 e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the tran
81. the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC Off Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the OFF tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Off Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Off Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the
82. tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control handle is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal lever 031507504 Mist Control 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever Do not adjust the steering column while driving up to lock the steering column firmly in place Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death d V ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph d d 3 AY 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located gt on the right side of the steering wheel Tilting Steering Column Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the 3 instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the s
83. to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set
84. until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone power sunroof and ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is
85. will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre ey lin P Rate bps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may t
86. with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You
87. 00 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 400 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy I
88. 2 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced w
89. 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The tr
90. 4o454 48564 Rebs ee aS 283 A INDEX 457 AEDE aE a d ee 360 Selection Of Lubricant 5264 e se a4 reiris 400 SOI PPP 284 Special Additives 45 3r e debo i o ie ori di 401 PUROCHC 6252445 9 us ES E a b Pe d Gas 285 DA arere anug a 5 55 oa ae ee es 6 eae 387 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 DENG Deal 244 38 wer Bea e here eee eode eens e 82 Body Mechanism Lubrication 389 pulla LOON 4 4 P uerius Gao Oty eed oa E UOS 913 Brake Assist System cssc RR 300 Drake Find cm 423 Die ke Fomine o guida ata OP ra Poe ded 293 Drake cle Gavan 9 8 83 Go B dr a Reg n Rod oie 296 398 Anti Lock ADS lt 4 s4a 4 edes ee e 297 299 Master Cy le sis 64550844024 a a 399 lyon CTI 299 Warn Fiche vce cee ane eed a4 eee es 186 Dike oda eae baw ho ee eee eee ARX GELS 296 398 Brake Transmission Interlock 283 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 80 Bulb Replacement ace sce dos doe ese ean ewes na 412 413 Bulbs Dio E ad a wx 9 OE Acto ard yen st 83 412 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 421 Capacities FIIO ss s aucsd os qct dome tH RERSCR ages 421 Caps Filler PHI pears eaa an Ge dts BP a RM RU Indre 339 Bins CPC oo 4 ON eo oe 378 385 Tower DEEDS 342 414 53 9 i084 ee enna PERRA 299 SCA Ln PP 404 Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 339 Caro Area COVE ocn ausge ci goes ROI Gd weap 170 Carco Area Features 2g usce s d i ane he HERR 169 Cargo Compartment LIC o2 xx
91. 55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as
92. AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle For Uconnect Voice Command refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy
93. Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on after the six to
94. Conditioner Maintenance 388 AF CONCINOMING uaque ipee node e ES 4445 4 260 Air Conditioning Controls vacetarstieeoices 260 Air Conditioning Filter s acsi ace m or t 9o 271 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 272 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 388 389 Air Conditioning System 2 1 0 0 260 264 388 Air Pressure Tires 0 000000 eee 318 ur A P P EP 56 66 Alrbag Deployment au v oos rsss taaie sheeted 67 nbgs Light wies essi RO oe Re 57 64 70 82 184 Airbag Waintenance os vcra VR ELSEPEEAES 69 ADAT OIE P 59 63 65 66 Airbag Window Side Curtain 60 63 66 Alarm LENE Pr X m 188 Alarm System Security Alarm 2 ue 200406000 ES 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 253 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 394 421 422 CapeCies were ewe ono s ade sd E es 421 DISPOSAL pesses sh dede doped dE IRR A dei 396 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 02ec eee vae 297 Anti Lock Warning Light 2r er gem 185 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearince Care 15a xv Suh st hie ee PERO 403 Posistance TOWING setes aa na miopa e io og den 107 Automatic Dimming Mirror uad 9n yes 89 Automatic Door Locks ess 29 31 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 264 Automatic Transaxle 12 277 282 360 400 Fluid bevel Check 4 4s0 ser 4n4556e66464 401 Inteplock SYSIGNY 4 44 s
95. ENCIES M 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may resu
96. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks
97. FF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C v an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboar
98. FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 243 W Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ EME age reba hay eae 5 RadiosOnl see 252 vO BETO Oe OE MEE Banya qe rte xn Ey stem ACHVAHON s e dido ace oa oper es 252 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI A A EEE E E E HEJUppEd PEE 247 identification Muiber ESN Deea EE UConnechue TheiPod ssi herbs 247 4 Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Poe Tus Feature 2 24 ea ae kk oe eae 248 p 6 s55 505555 4005 6546 EEan RE a O Controlling The iPod Using Eoarellite i ea v Geos oa V Ere fep t 253 Radio BUWONS 2 v saas 339a RUE N eaa 248 5 Reception Quality FOO 253 AT MOIE 2 65 93969 oo oa SACER EDAD oo ae 248 4 Operating Instructions Uconnect O List Or Browse Mode 250 Multimedia Satellite Mode 254 D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone UBI DER opreed er Kara RUE a osu xe 257 180 UNDERSTANDING YOU
99. Frequency of Fluid Change 402 403 Lubricant Selection 401 402 403 Map Reading Lights 4 4445 ss5 aao e4gooens 144 Master Cylinder Brakes lesus 399 WHITOiS MR TETTE TTTSEISOTRIOTC TTL TERT 89 Antomanc DIMMING s erare web secos ees RR e 89 Electric Powered 2 2 4inc2da0ced debe we oes 91 Heated eae se ces heds a eese eee eee meeeese 92 COUSINS 3 oe oo omues BO eR ee ee Bose oe 90 Rearview 0 0 0 cece es 89 MAI uo esc Ed ves seas d eue Eq eeu aa 92 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System essaie sese Yet d 326 Mopar aris s uua wr E eR EROR PRECOR RS 381 450 Multi Function Control Lever 140 New Vehicle Break In Period 80 Occupant Restraints 22 i265 sede vio ee ees 37 63 67 Occupant Restraints Sedan 59 60 63 66 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 1s use etes 335 oem e ererblrNMNNMNMNMNMNMNMNMVggg UNgsdsq fon dC eet oe ee een ee Gs 192 DD 190 192 CORDE nance Wiican esce oy hehe En Rb pea 198 Oil Change Indicator Reset lt isses tem s 198 CIL EB 44 024 40265 ga S RU v heit 383 421 CODAGID aces sd quia dos espressi 421 Chon e Neha ue esoeed ved Eso EROR EA bos 384 CHECKIN CCP rrr 383 DispGsdl 2lsvaeey4wePPSes exESQEESgS e 385 gu P 386 IdentiiedUoRn LOBO ed Ge os oe depre yo ae 384 Materials Added tO aa 144 PR ERROR Seg RE 385 Recommendation
100. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e n the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head
101. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
102. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Infants and Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are younger than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
103. ISTANCE 449 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than
104. LE 63 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollo
105. MENT PANEL NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix He Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the recirc
106. Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near rf If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 2 In very cold weather a if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 277 o Manual Transaxle If Equipped 2 7 o Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 277 D Nonwal Sarun 6 93 eae oem Bead oO ek 278 O Extreme Cold Weather below 20 TOES E a tee waa Y S e pa 278 Hif Engine Fails To Start 9c eR axo eed 2 9 BL ATIS Slate saeara amp 2E CREE EE RE 279 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 279 Bl Manual Transaxle If Equipped D Five Speed Manual Transaxle B Recommended Shift Speeds O Downs MUNS 242244 00565 e0heea Genes Bl Automatic Transaxle If Equipped O Brake Transmission Interlock System o Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock ur 424644 Cha oles ee bake eee ee utet 4 beth tt eee a eee 2 4 STARTING AND OPERATINC xe W AutoStick If Equipped 285 W Parking Brake 62242422444 REPRE 293 AOPEN ererek eee ene hoe oe bea Be 286 W Brake System gee e didi es ee eee ee pde te 296 O General Information 286 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 297 lll Four Wheel Drive Operat
107. OL LOLD GLlLLu 2 2 471 OPINN 30929093 ee VA EST ete tena E P E 321 Tread Wear Indicators 2 243 45 ee gee d 322 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 347 TOWO euo 93x ERO 14 0 REGE DOR eens R ce qi 344 24 Hour Towing Assistance 107 Disabled Vehicle a 2 oca dopo Re des 9 tono tawee seen eee eae ee eee eee aoe 347 Receatonal os 4444648 ose chan renee ae ae 355 WICK DL rRT 347 TOWING Assistance aa Sgen oops dcs Read c3 x Rosen 107 ccu ECT ITEM 288 Tailer TOWING auc RERO PALEIS ARE IPRC 344 Cobliis Systemi 1158 224 tea semi coe eee 354 sire PC eee ee eue es 346 Minimum IRCGUITCIMGINS basia s esris 348 Trailer and Tongue Weight 347 WIS 6594 4 os Orda IO oe ER Pe ane es 392 Tailer JONDE GUJE serere ts eee spot ee YO 347 Trader Wee Geeecersepeos ee ae eee es bes 347 Wramsate 424556442 6A Ge eee SUPREMO RB S EE 282 Automatic clle 12 277 282 400 PUCCIO o 6 Ge S5 eae 6 oh mum 285 Manual 2 655149 9 RURWUE SHE hee 3 5 14 277 280 CODE ODE ga cen xeu oa 6 oe age REN E ORA 282 ONONE orreri err EUER GURREG RES RM SE 285 Selechonm ot LUDAN aus qs s 3ore 3 pP ESTE 400 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless ENUY vacedeues oun oh oe vue 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 152 ArapnsporbHb CS so eyo uy ous bee CW ee oo qe Tread Wear Indicators i69 rox deees TOP OGOMeCer aco wed peas ina as ee Re ee Pe Trip Odometer Reset Button 20080040 sind NNAS noe o
108. ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the KA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized deal
109. OUR VEHICLE 421 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters Cooling System oo T y 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transaxle CVT If MOPAR CVTF 4 Equipped Manual Transaxle If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product fluid is not available then DOT 4
110. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
111. R INSTRUMENT PANEL M D Operating Instructions Video W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 259 mien vti Mp EE 257 BM Climate Controls suu oia so ea SR E T Res 259 ll Remote Sound System Controls O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 260 IP POMP PCG 4 ge 520 428 bueno 4 ER EY oS 257 D Automatic Temperature Control ATC aRadio Operio cs 2 5 23 Ia See pisita 258 Ha a Oe ait ae oe aia eens ania ndi OCD Player 0 cece cece eee ae o EE zd B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Q a Q Ea 2 11 10 9 8 C7 040107732 Air Outlet 5 Storage Bin 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 2 Demisters 6 Glove Compartment 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Climate Controls 11 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped 4 Radio 8 Power Outlet 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040307744 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge Fuel Door Reminder When the ignition switch is in the ON position A the pointer will show the level of fuel remain ing in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned
112. RAE NES 291 On Slippery SUITACeS sesa sea e en kes 288 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 289 Electric Remote Mirrors vec ise seve ct tae sees 91 Electrical Power Outlets 422i eo aem 161 Electronic Brake Control System 299 Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation eel CSSCSC CSC i s Electronic Stability Program 24 3 24 24 eR x Res 303 Traction Control Systent uso 2999 ce negaaes aog Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 148 Electronic Stability Program ESP 303 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 196 Emergency In Case of JACKING aes 85 8G eee DR 360 PUM IMS s 6 4 44 dc Gut n ae ee 4 3 ee 366 LONO Sega food aa Obes oe ee Fe ead a RE 371 Emission Control System Maintenance 380 426 I1 P IIT 378 Plock Heater PT DI 279 Break In Recommendations 80 Checking Ol Level scateng st 9e U C Sgt 383 Wool C denaeees nen eee ean eames 999 Exhaust Gas Caution aces ku rom REG 81 339 Fuel Requirements a ess osa doe tr etos 335 JOM Slat usa oa t ETA CES TEES STE 366 Ol m 383 421 422 Oi Ciianee InIStval 4 264 noes eee reprim 384 OLP Cap 44454 455 655 4om sy ome Hes 378 385 OUPO asiganesoga0 24545 28 Ead Pg We 422 Oil Selco aee raeur eset 46464 EI UR REA 384 CUL SUDSLG uusicrcun dd 19v px ES Sages 385 OVelliealilB to269d523ededeeGh Se eb P ens 358 Aempeniue Calpe ies cua esaeoen PES A 189 E
113. RATING 325 CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation bei
114. Radial PIY TeS onsen beeen eee cuu ont 320 W Fuel Requirements ied D Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 320 oO Reformulated Gasoline 335 ire OPNE asser pee ace wae 321 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 336 O Tread Wear Indicators 922 O E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 336 SMO OE ite eerdre pea a ee eee eae P 929 GMMI Gasoline a ioco hu eer See pare PY ed 337 H Replacement Lites 2 294 4 in ee heh 63 63 323 o Materials Added To Pel 2223 s 337 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M El Fuel System Cautions 4644546265 eawens 338 D Trailer Towing Weights 7 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 339 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 347 Cd Duel oan cei an aencteoares snares 339 ae a ee id HFuel Filler Cap Gas Cap i e 339 lowing Requirements vss mars 348 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 341 SEMIN MID eee Seg 2 esa ora eats Mi Vehicle Loading 341 aaa came Ei esses 355 A Vehicle Certification Label 122 mar ees 342 4 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle W Trailer Towing PD 344 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The H3 Common Towing Definitions 344 E e eG Daa eas aa gees Hae a O Trailer Hitch Classification 346 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children a
115. S OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the 6 VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e T
116. S is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes w
117. TE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 045607574 position The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rot
118. WR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ee TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related
119. a tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button prov
120. a aaa 3 o Borat ee oo DGDPCODBOSLUE 2o so dus eame pP Sog ue be oe Uconnect Hands Free Phone Understanding Your Instrument Panel AFP LLLLLLLIIIIIIILLLLUIIIIIULLILIILILIIULILLLILLLILILLILLILELLIULLO BGDSG BAOoowJA AoHAA GGGGUUGGGAnGALL IELLLAUL AUAeG B ULLH CLIHLLLLLLILUIOAG bLcuuAG N d e GGO GOBCZI Uniform Tire Quality Grades issu 453 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 247 Universal Transmitter ses rreri rran nekre aa 152 Unleaded Gasoline llle 335 MODI MITOS 22 s aes sce ake Fade X ded ded de a 92 Wallace DII DASS ag erasoari ER oh FUELS A oes 204 Vehicle Certification Label 342 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading smesa iaa 4 a iek ran hs 314 341 343 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Venicle SOragE qr 270 411 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Voice Recognition System VR 121 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 183 Warning Sol VET opere etum es i OPES EPOR 4 Warnings and Cautions 24444 49 05 ERR RR Reed 7 Warranty IMIOrMAON o 4 vex px ERE ERR REES 450 Waster Adding EIL nasa n ab qo dodo eee ned 390 Washers Windshield Ln 146 Washing Vehicle os ace deer moto act 404 Water Divine INOU 2uge5 x xod aoreet 3 eb ropes 257 Wheel and Wheel Tim 3 suea 4 55 guber sce ws 405 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
121. ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 030907663 Power Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The heaters provide the same heat level for both the seat cushion and the seatback The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off a If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light Off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light Off after 30 min utes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt 3 within two to five minutes WARNING
122. accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings d A 15 2 f 14 3 13 4 12 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance With the ignition in the ON position quickly less than one second press and release the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 button several times until you have displayed the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is displayed The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two sec onds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least 1 second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Vari ance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default is Zone 8 During program
123. action grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 456 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 297 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 395 P aS EEE E 339 Adding Washer Fluid sess perra eed Cmm eo 390 Additives Fuel 423 2d oma eS m9 9s 337 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 386 Air
124. ake longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM Operating Instructions Radio Mode STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER l MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right sided tbetadio faceriate Power Switc
125. and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather uph
126. andheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then t
127. ant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the
128. ap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights wi
129. ar in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction wi
130. around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Children too Large for Booster Seats Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt provides for the installation of the child restraint without comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positio
131. ary dials and inner push knobs eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045607540 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
132. as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 0231007734 Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters 1 Driver and Passenger Airbag 2 Knee Boltser NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag e Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior e trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC 2 Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Front and Side Impact S
133. ash your ve i hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild mE teh ane Pauteee arate car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum
134. atbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing n WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 373 Without The Ignition Key Battery power is required to release the brake Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed transmission interlock system automatic transmission with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be only There is a removable plug in the right side of the used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam override the system The ignition key must be in the ON age to the vehicle position to use the override lever Information Provided by D ANANL R MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 2 0L 377 W Maintenance Procedures 382 Bl Engine Compartment 2 4L 378 BB 91 MC
135. ation FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressi
136. aust Gas O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 63 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 021410235 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNINCG Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a Ig
137. aylist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if
138. back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple
139. be raised or lowered by using The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support driving position rotate the handle up or down 030907661 030907660 Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Driver s Seatback Recline To recline the seatback lean forward before lifting the WARNING handle then lean back to the desired position and release Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the handle Lift the handle to return the seatback to an shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest upright position In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 030907662 Reclining Seat 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Six Way Power Seats If Equipped WARNING The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the seat up Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is down forward rearward or to tilt the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its
140. been joined into one conference call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transfe
141. beyond that af and may stay on for as long as four seconds forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and Ures or the machon allorded If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the Continued brake system is not functioning and that service is 298 STARTING AND OPERATING M required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris
142. ble on this system Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification
143. by Towing Assistance 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vm button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send sto
144. by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi CAUTION Continued e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra tional five minutes of operation press the button a second time sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window window defroster only when the engine is operating e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window CAUTION ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to An optional authorized dealer installed roof rack with the heating elements cross rails is available through MOPAR for added cargo e Use care when washing the inside of the rear versatility window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water
145. by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers
146. c Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown t
147. call press the vR button and say Dial or Call followed 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the GEVR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
148. called passengers are properly secured too Express Open During Express Open operation any Do not allow small children to operate the sun movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or Closing the Sunroof any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for tw
149. cation Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con WARNING verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst materials that can burn Such materials might be damage grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a sco
150. ce the transaxle has cooled down and the light turns off you may continue to drive normally If the high speed is maintained the overheating will continue to occur If the overheating continues it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transaxle in NEUTRAL until the light turns off WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Warning Light under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 17 Temperature Gauge WARNING The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION 18 Cruise Indicator If Equipped Driving with a hot engine cooling system
151. ce the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary
152. could epus This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H Control System is ON pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with 19 AWD Indicator If Equipped This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
153. could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ru ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving or trailer F towing up long grades on hot days the auto matic transaxle oil may become too hot When the transmission overheat warning light turns on you will experience reduced vehicle performance until the automatic transaxle cools down On
154. creen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appe
155. ctivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Test the
156. ctor 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn xam V ERE 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ra 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Cooling System Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads Eee a peu ae none nee ee eating take the following actions When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans axle into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to speed maximize fuel efficiency cdita Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily STARTING AND OPERATING 355 RECREATIONAL TOWING NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC be recreationally towed flat towed
157. current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL li
158. d etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 25 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 26 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 27 Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped xi The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activatio
159. d is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed
160. d is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open Satety latch when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side Failure to follow this warning could result in serious facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the injury or death hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 031309871 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent to turn on the parking lights Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on the headlights 031407548 Headlight Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Instrument Panel Dimming Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the ce
161. d release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Inserting Compact D
162. dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on Europ
163. dentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size ee TH
164. der from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the vr button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the amp button and say Ucon
165. der the following Caution and Warning before doing so 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driv
166. designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate
167. ding You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine
168. discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING manually unplug the device and plug it in again To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical d
169. dow switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended 021906196 Power Window Switch Location Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls o
170. ds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full si
171. duce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others 302 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transaxle Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake
172. e 4 17 Kev Replacement euer eeu fae Renee es caca ss 16 Key Sentry immobilizer 4 2 4 6 gus pas ee ee ee es 15 Key lUReMunde race oe Seu Sx eb x idR CE aa e 15 Keyless Entry System Sedan 19 rm 12 Knee Bolster eus oa cuREGREPESGHES REGE E BORSE 56 57 Lane Change dnd Turn Signals sace Rr 416 Lane Change Assist 24 206 dace Soter ao kee 143 Lap Shoulder DENG seasea gioa tone eS mae d dn 39 Ec m 83 POOR 2992x933 ES ERN 4 cee oe ee ee os 138 Lead Free Gasoline less 335 Leaks Fluid een 83 Lite of Tires sss eg ST TT eh bees PRRs 925 LIne ate Sedan a 2625 00 55 bee Sha bee eae Ed 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 174 Light DUIS cse 2666 4 m S9 dene P tniii 83 412 LNE babe oes 663 45s Sa tS Se E TR SR ox 83 140 AIDAS uu Beso 53 pf Pu Rd RR RN 57 64 70 82 184 ir PP CP R 188 Ant bock MTM v s 185 Back Up saxa ope qup a eat al cba a aes 416 rake Waning scares kis eet Rae one Red 186 DID Replacement s 33 205 300908 Erri Ea a unos 413 COCO 24548 sagas dT REC PRECES SI 169 Center Mounted DIOP oe ware aue vw eee d ves 419 Daytime RUNNING a Sos Sra e m Eo up Tadas 142 Dimmer Switch Headlight 22e er nS 140 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 304 Engine Temperature Warning oss vie nns 186 EXSILIO seve sce gaan Geer eeyee sea neues 83 FOO nice bareohegena eae eee eee es 142 195 415 HeadligDt SWIN MEM 140 Imi reliisdo o CE 140 Els Beant
173. e Compartment And Storage Bin Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment 035106215 wm Rear Cupholders 035209107 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on Door Storage the release handle The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage i areas 035206143 Glove Compartment E E 035206217 Front Door Storage 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE lt Nb CU A 035306219 _ Rear Door Storage Upper Storage Compartment CONSOLE FEATURES To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on The floor console contains both an upper and lower the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart storage compartment ment and lift the lid open To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open Lower Storage Compartment 035306220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Car
174. e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you
175. e belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the
176. e control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pres sure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited 300 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal faster than the other the system will apply the brake of is released the BAS is deactivated the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and t
177. e driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pr
178. e file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bi
179. e number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook e Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported
180. e of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION woo WATER IN FUEL EXTERIOR gai FAR URE auger nn N FUEL REAR WINDOW i73 re ITI NTERMITTENT WIPER rm 5 4B F FUEL Fe Sie soy tae e DOME ridit FLUID LEVEL in w y C ds ENGINE O4 REAR Wito ELECTRIC ALLY WEATED n W BATTERY HEATED RRDA CHARON kei tt S G oi Oei Piian HER TELS PAPER fn ARALD STERRING FLUID ah RAN E SAS Te AIRBAG p WALIUMCTION TRANS EMGNE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL ucecATDR LiT nii TEMP TEMPERATURE BHEETHANIT ieee Dom AW amp vc OF HEAR FOG LAMP SEAT BELT 9
181. e oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubri
182. e to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press an
183. ean design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ee EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the t
184. ed above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lub
185. ehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Removable Load Floor The cargo area load floor is removable and can be a 035406694 washed with mild soap and water E Cargo Load Floor UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Cargo Tie Down Loops There are four D rings installed in the cargo area for WARNING securing cargo e Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision G N a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Y e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e a 035407731 D Ri mgs Continued 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback Th
186. ehicle information warning message displays e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features ome e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime ru e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion e Uconnect Phone displays if equipped manual transmission e Compass heading e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Audio mode display e Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h e Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h the following messages e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime motion after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Gate Ajar with a single chime e Headlamps or Park Lamps On e Key In Ignition e Check TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change in
187. either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800
188. en the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 04560755 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate 270 UND
189. ensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Advanced Front Airbag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output e No objects should be placed over or near the appropriate to the severity and type of collision as airbag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash which may receive information from the impact sensors severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate at the front of the car Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc
190. ensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you migh
191. ent confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to
192. equired Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 M
193. er 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light qum This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph kph 7 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to er eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition N switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either
194. eral seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN positi
195. es tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be rep
196. essure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure
197. etting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph WARNING 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you Manual Transaxle Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
198. event the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 second
199. every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Mist Feature CAUTION Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the allow the wipers to return to the park position before wipers will continue to operate turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to
200. evices prior to using the inverter To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting 115 Volt Power Outlet Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 CAUTION Continued CUPHOLDERS Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers two illuminated cupholders located in the front vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution ObUo iu di After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 035106214 Illuminated Front Cupholders 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear STORAGE pos Glov
201. expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance in
202. f all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 In general you will first loosen the ad
203. f the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play th
204. f the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607757 E 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha 022607497 nism 1 Downward Movement 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock 2 Rearward Movement into the back decorative plastic half ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 022607494 ss AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt Th
205. ff This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Operation Full Automatic Operation Blowe
206. ff your vehicle s battery ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the h
207. for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection
208. g and Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 280 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator Remember to disconnect the cord before driving pedal Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transaxle WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully a
209. g capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises a
210. g chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transaxle Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with Trailer Tow Prep Package AHC 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 348 STARTING AND OPERATING M Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer ton
211. ge If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under Instrument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder and power steering add as needed A Failure to perform the required maintenance items e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct may result in damage to the vehicle operation e Check the manual transaxle fluid level R
212. ght off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the eng
213. go Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press in on the flashlight to release it 035410217 035410216 Three Press Switch Press And Release Cargo Cover To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high ane oo ee D anes ae bad NOH 10 ee er E een E TE mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide into one of the two notches located in the rear trim the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward of the rear trim panel on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel Cargo Cover Guides 035406965 Rear Trim Notches 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the v
214. gue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the
215. h Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 042305233 SEEK Buttons RES RSC Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch TUNE SCROLL O 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Ph
216. hat seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Lap Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the belts shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock using a seat belt properly and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued
217. he ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button loca
218. he parking brake released a brake system malfunc Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by before driving failure to do so can lead to brake an authorized dealer immediately failure and an accident Continued 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ee BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Ligh
219. he seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fuse Fuse FILAS Green FED e Green AER O1 Yellow Interior Lighting Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse o Empy yo 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Lt Blue Feed 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Red Feed 15 Amp Power Outlet Lt Blue 2 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter Yellow 13 20 Amp Pwr Run Acc Outlet Yellow RR Dome Lamp Cigar Lighter 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Red OCM 20 Amp Trailer Tow Yellow 10Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir Red Steering Cntrl Sdar Hands Free Phone 10 Amp IOD CCN Red 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat Green tery Feed 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse
220. he selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a
221. he unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to dea
222. hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in or
223. heel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition e Over steer when
224. heft Alarm Security Alarm 22s uos Rn 18 Theft System Security Alarm wu ge suy Res 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 4 2 5 06 ehe eer aet o sas 173 AHDSISBEIDE COMM cadet aad ten 6 rcd Y od deg 147 Tire and Loading Information Placard 313 Tire Identification Number TIN 311 Te MI D RIPE PET 308 Tire Satety Information d soi uei serea 2 mo es 308 TMCS rm 83 317 453 Agme Lie Of Vives lt yiacenon es ieee es es O20 PG IJOSSUIE 22450 4e 95222990 9949 ERTE 317 dr ere oop eee bh eee ee oe he es 324 Chang 6654654 oh ee PPS 4 CEPS PR 360 Compact Opale anny se serren he Hens Re RS 320 Plat GCMANGING poe g Aes 4 43 RR US eens 365 General Information 317 PODOP ween 4 ce ded 29v A PR SE A abbas 319 Inflation Pressures 42 s dere m ces 318 WACKING Gannon SS poe 8 IRE E ENSE eae ee 360 Lite DE TIES o eR CERES A REL RR d d ERROR 923 Load Capacity ue vavou vues Pario v Fare eas 313 314 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 326 Pressure Ware LIENE 24 24 6 Garde rre see a 190 Oualiy Gradio segg es 9 pues aas TREES 453 Radial M 320 Replacement Pcr 323 FOON apode aeea NEARE ens aeons 325 OUE X3 9299053 8 by eee Eaker 308 317 DIZBS 22393 Gee eee ese eke Oe RARE QU ES 309 DOOW Tiles scs unde 1 ood 54 53 EHE RUE owe 925 D EEEERILSIIIISIIIGIIIIIIILLLILILLILILHIIILILIIIIIILOULLILLLULUGLUG CdL LZU SOcacdedAALULLI Le GI IG GGGU GoLAILLLAHLILLLLLLLL ULHU L IAIALLLUOLeLLLLLLUDIIU GG OEA L
225. hen applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions e The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only re
226. houlder Belt sses 3 oot RR 44 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage E And Pregnant Women 4 44642 454 dor PER RS 55 Cadd KRestaint 2 462556 6ee544 468456444 72 IAEPHOGE 26444552 ooo bob RS Benes hee eee DD PHONE DCM 2239393992359 een Gee usd d 39 INSPECHON P aos hoger eee E 82 FECICHSIONCKS aces d 0 oon bw a oed Sore wees e vox 49 Real Oa 22 eceoeucy Ron SA ECRLRRE RR OE RUSO PoB d RC 39 c Sov 126 CUS lt a e665 8 deba dedo RR A dein 126 lec rm 191 Lumbar Sub DOE y es icem d mmy SUP eod ER dore 128 iridis ren Gaq es inoue 136 Kear Folding Sedan 4 xv e CE RR sence s 136 Deaton Ne PASE auus ee Ee eters Hobs ae es 129 LUBUS S24 exea 4 RE SEG RET R3 PE 129 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selecon OP OW os uos db oeeeee Pes SIRE 384 Sentry Key Immobilizer 3 ordo Res 15 Sentry Key Programming 45444444492 400 EE 17 Sentry Key Replacement 223299 69 RURSUS 16 en INDEX 469 Service Assistance 0 00 447 Service Contract 2 44502 on oe eR 2 3 5 BOERS 449 Service Manuals aus eren mU X eas does 451 Setting the Clock vus md 208 222 224 227 236 Dele Personal uiia duas gana 201 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 281 Shoulder Belts s see Sue e ee wee wes E EAR ES 39 DIGG viuo PEPPER 65 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 271 SIPTIOIS JUI eent oa eG om ee Bok Dos 83 184 416 Slippery Surfaces Driving OD 3 5 a6 402049 her 288 Snow Chains Tire Chains
227. ial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean t
228. id should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary
229. ides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channel
230. ight back Ce MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch e 8 the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life Fog Lamps 1 Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout 2 Remove electrical connector from bulb 3 Remove bulb from housing 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tail Lamp Rear Turn Signal and Backup Lamp 2 Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 1 Remove the two push pins from the taillamp housing 3 Twist and remove socket from lamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace License Lamps 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull bulb from socket ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Center High Mounted Stoplamp Light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement Off Road Lamp 1 Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the housing 81c68d11 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the 23 Disconnect the bulb from the lamp harness to replace housing and rotate it into the position shown the bulb 481c68d39 j 81c68d4b ee MAINTAINING Y
231. ill affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System V This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module STARTING AND OPERATING 329 e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pre
232. illar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GV
233. ils Auto Lock Doors at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M position automatic transmission Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection RKE Unlock Driver s Door 1st When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display
234. in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use
235. ine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an
236. infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH WARNING child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and e Improper installation can lead to failure of an Tether for CHildren infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ied bolle he smanutxctur ts drer ons ex ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they used Hi Tear Bran A rearward facing child re should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap ing posue airbag which may cause severe or shoulder belt fatal injury to the infant actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing
237. inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system de
238. ing websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other with out wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either R the radio or the mirror will contain the two control butt
239. ing through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability 202 STARTING AND OPERATING M in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steerin
240. ion If Equipped 287 W Electronic Brake Control System 299 Mi Driving On Slippery Surfaces 288 H Anti Lock Brake System ABS 299 O Acceleration d aaa HES RR ee eS EROS 288 B Traction Control System TCS 299 EL TOCHON 4 40424 oa 44 Gane Se eee d ag 288 O Brake Assist System BAS 300 M Driving Through Water iios ar RR 289 H Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 301 O Flowing Rising Water 289 3 Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transaxle O Shallow Standing Water 289 i ZI E s HM On Road Driving Tips earen 291 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 303 NOU DEUS Lenerierrosa SERIE eees 291 B Tire Safety Information 308 O Power Steering Fluid Check 293 DO Tire Markings 00 enne 308 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 O Tire Identification Number TIN 311 W Tire Chains iekk k exkeRRERRS EXIT 324 O Tire Terminology And Definitions PAM E now b MP 325 H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 313 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 325 W Tires General Information 317 W Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 326 EL POOE sineren perrea 317 EL Dose Vcc Soca und oes 4 tS SOR Ee ab 329 EL Tire Inflation Pressures x uds ere 54s 318 O Premium System If Equipped 331 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 319 O General Information
241. ion approximately 35 degrees Rear Seats Folded Flat maximum and release the strap To raise the seatback pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position 030906211 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only with the vehicle is parked It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 031308887 belts A Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Hood Release Lever and using a seat belt properly 2 Move the safety latch located outside the vehicle under the front edge of the hood toward the center and TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD IR i NOR To open the hood two latches must be released UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hoo
242. ire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two di its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
243. ire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tight ened e f the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar 342 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B P
244. ire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers
245. ired Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare fo
246. is could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying Fold Down Speakers purposes only not for passengers who should sit REAR WINDOW FEATURES in seats and use seat belts Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper M NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled
247. is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen
248. isc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into away and jam the player mechanism the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than a second CD if one is already loaded 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the ejected before a new disc can be loaded other side is a CD should not be used and they mE can cause damage to the player If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and EJECT Button Ejecting a CD begin to play when you insert the disc The display will Press the EJECT button to eject the CD show the track number and index time in minutes and a seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to ret
249. itch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Startin
250. ith the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Continued eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze a minimum solution of 50 recommended MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioni
251. ives CAUTION AUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac CAUTIO turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and Do not use chemical flushes in your transaxle as the result in a complete transaxle failure Refer to Flu chemicals can damage your transaxle components ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Your Vehicle for further information Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Manual Transaxle If Equipped The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission Fluid And Filter Changes fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the flu
252. ized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e ope
253. jecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next
254. justers on the lower and tether straps so that you can attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages more easily The tether strap should be routed over the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat I Sc CN 022606150 Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH 2 compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately duri
255. laced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 322 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires sho
256. lay in the odometer display eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Lo tIrE When tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tIrE for three cycles CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the sched uled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the O
257. le chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position T 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power win
258. ll flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if
259. lone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transaxle If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 2 8 STARTING AND OPERATING M Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition sw
260. lt Continued a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 371 CAUTION Continued e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transaxle Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a fl
261. lter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Y Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer a d E Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Repla
262. m facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher P t aS Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly Jacking Locations 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance i
263. maintenance listed in the Maintenance When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can information When towing a trailer never exceed the cause a loss of control poor performance or dam GAWR or GCWR ratings age to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued Continued Continued 350 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee WARNING Continued Towing Requirements Tires e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to alwa
264. mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See wner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major caus
265. mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure
266. much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear Vanity Mirror window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Sun Visor Sliding Feature Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further The sun visors may be extended out to provide more information coverage of the side glass 030406199 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the follow
267. n 28 AWD Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds 4WD 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the AWD system soon When blinking Ihe 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the EVIC messages For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC 30 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will change the display to the choices available for EVIC For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster gu nu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 041006717 eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 The EVIC consists of the following e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e System status e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e V
268. n Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NO
269. n or shift lever could result You must also press the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continu ously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT and or the 286 STARTING AND OPERATINC M engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen AutoStick is deactivated at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling Operation NOTE AutoStick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather AutoStick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate AutoStick and shift up to
270. n the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adju
271. n the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time turn it to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate 2 021906197 Window Lockout Switch 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed NOTE without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the motion liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your
272. nect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Setup Voice Training command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period mm Performance is maxim
273. nector WG pane ote eae eee eee eee ee eee 247 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 247 Console fee Ex eee eee be Red 3 35 168 Contract Service ee ee ee 449 Coolant Antifreeze lll 421 422 COOUMGSVStICM 44444 Ee ERES P DESI gud 393 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 2 22 RAS 395 Coolant Level ca cand cated RRR do 3G 393 397 E INDEX 459 Disposal of Used Coolant 396 Drain Flush and Refill 394 MisPCCHOW x1 2s e 3uns UP pores seus 397 Points to Remember 396 397 lar coca Cap DEP 396 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze Corrosion Protection 2 sos uea 54 52043 2528 04 403 Ce LIS cosas ay Put S ueh CRUS ERE 189 CUDMOIGES 2eteore le aeuee share pene i ees 168 Customer Assistance 000 eee 447 Dealer Service 23x bcc ea ren PRESE awe es 382 Defroster Rear Window 175 Defroster Windshield 83 262 268 Delay Intermittent Wipers 146 Diagnostic System Onboard 2 s2 4 080 Rm 379 Dimmer Switch Headlight i222 ERR ets 143 Dipsticks POWOr OCOLO auctae e depict eed Reda abd 293 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant si 30 ibd esas 396 BWC 0 PPP 385 Door LOk CC 28 Door Locks Automatic een 29 Door Opener Garage us oq dd sorde me 9E 152 Downs ME ses edd pardo dee 1 Pana eens oa ed 281 Driver s Seat Back D uc esu sca 6 deg eo inier 129 DINING ud wedghtenrteveec e puer
274. ng performed 326 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is shown in the following diagram E EA ES 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure a
275. ng the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison
276. ng this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classic Rock Cls Rock Foreign Language 16 Digit Character Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM ru Bons Rhythm and Blues If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Religious Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rock Soft Rck the following items Soft Rhythm and Blues soft R amp B e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will
277. nhanced Accident Response Feature 67 Exhaust Gas Caution 36 81 339 391 EXDUSE Syst aussen ose orae cia A ranks 81 391 o E a MR ID C 83 Filters Lug enr A Pr 386 Pa COMMIMONING sepat aia geeks oe ea 271 Eucine I ous wa 9 FPRREI IS seen anes 386 422 Idco DC 358 Hazard ami 3s oy P EE RA ER E RS 358 TUNNA ENDE MEUM 83 184 416 D EEEERLLLIIIIIIIIGIILIIIILILULIILIHLLUIUIU LII I GHIIIGCI LUG umNg oi Pun 08 LLL LLLUL LLUU AL AUG TLOLIALUHAAGDHa G UGAGAA UEGL U u u DAA LN LUOOGCbSCECKCLU LOOV LL DCwbwehep hl 2 OL 1 36 Flat TuS IOWI G ix ist eie TIMER AES S ds S 365 Flooded Engine Staring usse c eodd 279 Flid Drake 22 406 5 6 04 dare eee EHE eee PS 423 Fluid Capacities uso uou aec nip ds hepa eed a tiii 421 Fid Leaks ass 2e Beck och E oru e d EP S A A 83 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle leen 401 Power SICCIING uasa dens es deb Chee d 4 ded 293 PIGIGS E es deen eas Peas Howe PM eed S 422 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 422 FOP VACHS 4408 be none ER P mae eee Oe 142 195 415 Folding Rear Dede serores xd Ioh rrari ees 136 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 4 cas os ims 136 Four Wheel Drive eee 287 c P ey Ss 287 Four Wheel Drive Operation 287 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sssosadbeREesem Ps x 970 Dueb 222 99 2 5 0744925 oe eee ee 335 422 non A C ease ue 339 O h ven 4645454545 bE Ss SEES MI 337
278. nition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission If Equipped 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will no
279. nnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit ee UNDERSTANDING T
280. ns only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical instal lation instructions 022610332 Rear Seat LATCH Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage o
281. nter portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Lights Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cl
282. nto pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached
283. o seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof opera
284. ocedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger
285. of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display onn 5 gay tera eee on obs a ee eG Door Ajar D c ge AGG aes NE ee ee Go HD Gate Ajar ASCAP 26s i eute qa perde Ped pads Fuel Cap Fault LOUE 529 9 nce a eR ees Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster all warnings including Door Ajar and Gate Ajar will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will disp
286. oice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vr button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 1 ds ea d ae dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you ma
287. olstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commerc
288. on 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This
289. on Of Operation si eek m edem s 161 se A a Hm lala Electrical Power Outlets 161 EO MOM ope a tes a is ll Power Inverter If Equipped 163 W Rear Window Features 174 NM opholde suorum P reak Rave obe soe S 165 PHSCRE UNEIG ee ps _ Siete a ae ee ee ea 166 SS VGN EBON ees aah a wae a HS ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 176 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030407085 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean
290. on skin flush the area imme It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Continued Continued 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued CAUTION e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi before connecting the charger to the battery Do tioning components Such damage is not covered by not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only
291. one If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM st
292. one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track
293. ons CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See EJECT Button E
294. ons s Uconnect Phone but ton and vR Voice Command button that will enable you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt
295. ontainer absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point CAUTION This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Automatic Transaxle CVT If Equipped taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Selecon OE labnesnt Continued It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 fluid which has been formulated with special metal to Special Additives metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its ing Your Vehicle for further information performance may be impaired by supplemental addi t
296. onths Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Replace the spark plugs Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals
297. or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from en
298. or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitiga tion ERM Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Sta bility Control ESC All systems work together to en hance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicl
299. ormance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display inform
300. others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confi
301. ough N the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION M VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal 12 B Locking Doors With A Key 15 H Key In Ignition Reminder 15 W Sentry Key ocsosssscheneeekumbe Ry 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 XO Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 22 c9 eb meg 18 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped H To Set The Security Alarm o To Disarm The System D Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate D Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press O Illuminated Approach If Equipped 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME H To Lock The Doors And Liftgate O Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 3 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 22 TT TIT 21 Hr Using The Panic Alarm 557 4 2p RES 23 O Programming Additional Transmitters 23 O General Information 2936 eae cia ERR 23 O Transmitter Battery Replacement
302. passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHIC
303. ph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses Shue eee ue eee eee eases KR
304. pplied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine Size Accel eration Rate All En gines Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 282 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting Damage to the transaxle may occur if
305. pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Release the clutch pedal 2 3 4 Start the engine 5 6 Rotate the steering w
306. r Preferred Automatic How Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob io any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower Control Automatic User selectable to any specd Mode Control Automatic Automatic Air Temperature Control Automatic Automatic Air Recirculation Control Automatic but can be overridden Automatic but can be overridden A C Operation Automatic Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Prelerred Automatic Sct made knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Sel temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable io any speed User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable lo any air delivery point Automatic Automatic User sclectable outside or recirculated User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off User selectahle A C on or off 045609172 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions
307. r cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Replace the spark plugs L1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer l8 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME t This maintenance is recommended b
308. r equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Over Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of tance When towing you should allow for additional 2 000 Ibs 907 kg space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Continued 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Your authorized dealer offers a trailer wiring harness designed specifically for your vehicle Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O OP O Ws Four Pin Conne
309. r looseness or end play replace if necessary O C O O O O C C O L L L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires fi
310. r proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by D ANANL R UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS idle PEE 89 W Uconnect phone If Equipped 93 B Inside Day Night Mirror 89 sientcun PP m 95 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 89 H Phone Call Features oaio ducc ares 103 o Outside Mirror Driver Side 90 O Uconnect phone Features cet na 106 O Outside Mirror Passenger Side 90 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 110 PLOW er MUTO out ie e piots ERA Ed 91 H Things You Should Know About Your d Heated Mirrors If Equipped isses 92 Dcontect M PRONE e euren x uw Erw de Fares 112 Hl Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 92 O General Information 121 O Sun Visor Sliding Feature 92 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ll Voice Command If Equipped 121 3 Adjus
311. r the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 031409884 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX Ihe windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle Wiper Washer Control Lever 036407502 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Wiper Control 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle
312. railer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The followin
313. range Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles PARK i E you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is This range supplements the parking brake by locking the running Before exiting a vehicle you should always transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever in the PARK position shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 e Look at the shift indicator window on the shift lever bezel to ensure it is in the PARK position e You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering colum
314. rating mode MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate T PUB AUDIO SELECT 042005200 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing
315. ration from the driver s seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link to a large degree rely on the phone and network and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to not the Uconnect Phone the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced pu pbi py Selene Mo by lowering the in vehicle audio volume pue CUM COAT MOIS eee mene Tu remain in Bluetooth ON mode 3 e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English Uconnect Francais Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed See See Setup Read Send Phonebook Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries
316. rching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for a prolonged period Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 1
317. re apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK or manual transaxle in REVERSE or first gear 294 STARTING AND OPERATING The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Iw XR ar Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transaxle is placed in gear
318. red Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the curr
319. refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equi
320. ricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filtersfrom your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and
321. rn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 0 WHAT TO DO IN EMERG
322. rred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OPE 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number diale
323. running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 desired Then using body pressure move forward and WARNING ts WARNING rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked 030907665 Front Seat Adjustment 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Manual Lumbar If Equipped The driver s seat height can
324. rward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger o the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 022607726 Positioning Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow th
325. s This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger 021410235 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF Three Button RKE Transmitter EQUIPPED NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and with metal objects liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge t
326. s obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 365 WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
327. s long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION NOTE e The TPM
328. s stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operatio
329. se 2868s Senn oie P ae ae Pe ed A EA 143 ROPID PP E 413 eX D E oo es T RTT TTTTTETSTTTT TT TT TT 140 Heated Mirrors eee 92 Pleated ents esseer Seda cee epa mde 131 Heater 2 23 oS 6 ee Roo oe Ge eG RES eS 260 Heater Pngine PIOCK voeux gore p hwo aaa Ties 279 Hill Start Assist ax ue23 5 67V vache Sex Re ROS OHSS 302 Hitches TANCE TOWING x4 12 9 99 39e y dos hea pad I 346 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release eene 138 OOE X2s4 Ra42 5epbPIS E RS OCA S cR 4 12 o ear Er AS EEEF os 12 Nn INDEX 463 IgiBon Key Removal 24442405 993 9 25 91 14 12 Immobilizer Genty Key 6 54 3 6 beat sarah oH 15 rant Restant 4 344045 e tirer EEEn yas 2 RE d 73 Information Center Vehicle 0 196 Inside Rearview Mirror 046 89 Instrument Cluster s cuna geen iene eee aa ne 183 Instrument Panel and Controls a vaa 84 23 05 181 Instrument Panel COVO ue seaasch eh ees ess 407 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 408 Integrated Power Module Fuses 408 interior Appearance Cale 24 ec cumeespe cy d nes 406 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 146 INCROCMCHON irys saas ot 279 DU US se eee es 4 Jack Location 4 n on aoaaa 361 Jack Operation ser eraser a OR SOS eR ere bu 360 362 Jacking InstritelollS x sce saepe Seeds tus 362 JUMIP State 2eucpi9 es3cRRTO HORE ease ee et 366 Key PIOC IMMI 265 ua s bo ek seed ae sa
330. sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank Key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new
331. shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position 022607727 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the restraint webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around Z your lap 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until
332. sion e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling kept Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Pl
333. sistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book yes previous record again o redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR but
334. sitioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional s
335. smission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF Four Wheel Drive Switch EQUIPPED Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi This feature provides full time on demand four wheel tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose drive 4WD traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Stability Control ESC in Starting and Op erating for further information DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
336. ss 402 Kear Drive Assembly a i334 33 0 4 E CR e god 402 Rear litigate Sedan soaa a eei dires dem aeg dea t 35 Rear Seal Bollo 4 3 ede EROR RC HORROR ORE 136 Rear Window Defroster 175 Rear Window Features xke re RE REEF SS 174 Rear Wiper Washer 2 62 sad OR d CR Eh pol ge wes 174 Recreational Towing Refrigerant Reminder Seat Belt Remote Control Door Locks Security Alarm Remote Keyless Entry Sedan Remote Sound System Radio Controls Remote Starting System Replacement Bulbs Replacement Keys Replacement Parts Replacement Tires Reporting Safety Defects Restraint Head Restraints Child Restraints Infant Restraints Occupant Retractable Cargo Area Cover ees dll NN NMMMM2st 242 xWw ENNN Rol Over VAMOS 242 92 ex E RREOION ES ees 4 Roof Rack Luggage Rack iet 176 Rotati n WINGS uua duco Beach 2p df reb EE ee ki 925 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 82 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 83 Safety Defects Reporting 4 us eR ERE ous 450 Salet Exhaust Gao uoa i e these ee ene e tee End 81 Safety Information Tire ou ase ama ote oo be ee 308 Sate T EM 81 Satelite Radio Antenna wicca uos d 2s eo poe SE hes 239 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 252 Schedule Maintenance leen 426 Seat Belt Maintenance 2229 x33 ey edes 408 peat Delt Reminder uus acorde 4p 3 9 ones ey 9r dra 59 Seat Bells 2 nost uem oo bee yid P EROR epia 37 82 Adjustable S
337. ssure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ie fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on
338. st the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between
339. subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored i
340. t on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per formance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immedi ately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Anti Lock Brake System ABS WARNING Continued The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system The ABS cannot prevent accidents including automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking those resulting from excessive speed in turns conditions to prevent wheel lock up following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS Warning Light monitors the ABS The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ass System The light will come on when the ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase ignition switch is turned to the ON position braking or steering efficiency
341. t function SENTRY KEYS The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10
342. t get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and Maintaining Your
343. t has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil chan
344. t in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time If ADDING FUEL the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap adjust the ventilation system to force fresh out side air into the vehicle The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure Continued the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 340 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable CAUTION over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e Damage to the fuel system or emission control surface system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Fuel Filler Door Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A f
345. t rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 iniri a 24 22 05 16 y 56 48 Sampling Bit Rate kbps eiia Frequency kHz P MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the
346. t ri 453 Quality eur P M 453 oO Treadwear 4 met be eae Oe PRS SES HE Se Remus 453 Temperate Grades so ocior PR ewe en ts 454 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle
347. t to return this feature to its previous setting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 A sing
348. tects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 23 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer
349. ted on the instrument cluster to clear this message In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESP TCS Indica tor Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the ESC On mode of operation NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 308 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan
350. tering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set
351. terval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 EVIC Functions EN 041006982 EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions is displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release
352. tervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transaxle power steering or air condition ing Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as describ
353. than Natural Heater If Equipped 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery C 31 33 34 35 36 37 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lampe eso 0 9 8 93 Euch ed rA pa Center Dome Lae icr sap Pos i fore ae ofer d Rear Cargo Lamp Flashlight 8 A3SLF LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam High Beam Headlamp H13 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757KA Pront Fog LOI De ix vr EY OSTIA aes ees PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMOL saro pru pedcs RR restats LED Assembly Rear Tau Stop Lois a v vasca dra os qr edes ac d s 3157 Kear Tum Lamp 246 vo aa tares 3157AK or 3157A Backup Lamp cet sk wr ERERESer Dd W16W 921 License AM P W5W Off Road Lamp sur dodo aaa H3 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 BULB REPLACEMENT 2 Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red lock out at the green connector Headlamps 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling 4 Twist the bulb to the left stra
354. that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time
355. the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake WARNING Continued should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or WARNING injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK a manual transaxle in RE e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving VERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury number of reasons A child or others could be pire eaters dr aie CAUTON Do not leave the key in the ignition switch A child oa could operate power windows other controls or If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with move the vehicle t
356. the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch down to second or first gear when descending a steep vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine grade is at idle speed When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL downshift early so that the engine will not be into any forward gear when the engine is above overburdened idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything NOTE You MUSI press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
357. thout stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwis
358. ting Active Head Restraints 199 O Voice Command System Operation 121 Folding Kear ocal e x 9 3d 2799 QR ec aa cs 136 O Commands M 123 M To Open And Close The Hood 138 E VOICO TANDE iur Es bore EUR Spar ds 126 ML Lu gebe et RES are Led Rn oe es 140 ieee ee ee ee ee re oe ee ee 126 O Multifunction Lever 140 El Front Seat ACiUSUMENE a 4444602545 wees 126 o Headlights And Parking Lights 140 o Manual Seat Height Adjustment O Instrument Panel Dimming 141 i a a A ee El iehits On Reminder uu duas P dr 141 BO Manual Lumbar If Equipped 128 Bios dishes Panipeed ez e04ea0 lt 24 ee 142 O Driver s Seatback Recline 129 a Daytime Running Lights W Equipped s s 10 docete BOWEHDESUI SM PLDUDUSC ues maa ien O Torm als pe vad as any tA REE SOEUR RA 142 Sia taped a Sarena eed m Pane Change 5515L 3 v x daro rtp RE Yum as 143 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 192 o High Low Beam Switch 254944200 needs 143 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 o Flash To Pass uxo x ike RR REPRE E 143 E Mapy Reading Lights au avum tomm aye ea a4 144 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 144 o Windshield Wiper Operation 145 O Intermittent Wiper System 146 o Windshield Washers ied e 146 ELSE Peale e random Geet dang a 147 W Tilt Steering Column sas REPRE RAS 147 ll Electronic Speed Control If
359. tion will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience This power outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices 034606144 12 Volt Power Outlet 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON WARNING or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element To avoid serious injury or death do not hold the lighter in the heating position Only devices designed for use in this type of NOTE outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will
360. tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 324 STARTING AND OPERAT NG ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom capacity other than what was originally equipped mended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued ee STARTING AND OPE
361. to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at WARNING idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may WARNING b too hot See ME UM e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The If this happens the transmission overheat in vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You F dicator light will come on and the vehicle will could be crushed Never put any part of your body slow slightly until the
362. to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASS
363. tomatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation If Equipped Operation of the system is quite simple The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati 045607537 cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the 045607534 adjustment Automatic Temperature Control ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn o
364. ton you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Commands The V
365. u eREARS oy Ge TE OSEERE PIS Luggage Carrier 458 INDEX LLLLILLIILIILILILIIIILILLLLIILIIILLILLLILLLE UILIGNLOL ULL LLELLALamA OIuA LIALULIULLUUL LZLLALLALLLLULLLLLULILLLILcLLLILALAALJGD DDLIXUI OIOHtULL Ca OL E sg2um ee ee brut oun te REPE TP 169 Corgo Load PIOOP 254462650445 54 44 bo ebbe 172 Garoa ie DOWNS sere ars 9 dete tenes aE 173 Canin icc PPP 176 Cellular Phone voa ccna nae es SENSE 93 259 Center High Mounted Stop Light 419 Chains Lite soon tee oboe Bake oa eee es 2 eos 324 Chance A EAD THE 4 2 24 parse ue Ihe a oe CS es 260 Chart Bie DIAS usos we queue eee vaipiees 309 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 380 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 81 Mises mori D 81 CIBIQ Nesta eui keno 3 395 9 o os Ped 72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 76 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 75 Child Safety LOCKS 6443 edes te E mE cS EIOS PU RE 02 CHUNG Ded S oues sem rx uS eee ok ob eee ees 78 Clean Air GasOune ooo 554 ipsia 4 Ses ae 335 Cleaning Wheels qv 405 Climate Contool jones eens dohe trr 42 259 Clock x ne oa ewan ea eee ERU A 208 222 224 227 236 CWC seene AX EUREN ob dea ee ee ae GA ERE 399 Clutch Thid s sous a ee REUS EG RAE P3 RS SA 399 Com Holder esas was 8 ees SEG Eee Se ee we 168 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 258 Compact opare INE aeagetvaao du ege we caus 320 Compass VatIdDOB 4664 he oo eH oO 4 9 es 204 Con
366. uel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasoline without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 338 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using
367. ulation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the T blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Au
368. uld be 2 New Bre replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement
369. urn to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported b
370. urns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after sev
371. use harmful interference 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal x Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021410236 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case sn
372. uster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signals NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 30 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened o
373. valent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engin
374. ver collisions 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight secon
375. whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR I
376. y say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 p e h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi A Mc ne fo O T tOaner To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR System Setup E button to stop recor
377. y the manufacturer g to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident CSOmmrmcommZon mo2zrames IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eee eee ee hag aes 447 O Prepare For The Appointment 447 APrepare A List 4444 fevered apne ade aes 447 o Be Reasonable With Requests 447 W If You Need Assistance 447 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 448 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 448 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee xc chee a ooo 448 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY O Service Contract cnn lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only E MOPAR Parts ll Reporting Safety Defects O In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 In Canada B Publication Order Forms 450 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire EM Tracom Grades 24i bos ce md tari
378. y the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio
379. you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force using a seat belt properly outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as requ
380. you hear a click 022606149 Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle T Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point
381. ype thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze per formance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one
382. ys achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher CAUTION load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury WARNING An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a traile
383. ystem off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use 81bc4c2c WARNING Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever toward you CANCEL normal braking or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed S
384. ze The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are po
385. zed water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Cool

2010 Jeep Compass Owner Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents